Samsung HW-H760 User Manual

HW-H760
User manual
Wireless Audio - Soundbar
Imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive a more complete service, please register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 1
2014-11-04
5:29:44
FEATURES
FEATURES
TV SoundConnect
TV SoundConnect lets you listen to audio from your TV on your Soundbar via a Bluetooth connection and lets you
control the sound.
HDMI
HDMI transmits video and audio signals simultaneously, and provides a clearer picture.
The unit is also equipped with the ARC function which lets you listen to sound from your TV through the Soundbar via
an HDMI cable. This function is only available if you connect the unit to an ARC compliant TV.
Surround Sound Expansion
The Surround Sound Expansion feature adds depth and spaciousness to your listening experience.
Surround Sound Expansion is powered by Sonic Emotion.
Wireless Subwoofer
Samsung’s wireless module does away with cables running between the main unit and the subwoofer.
Instead, the subwoofer connects to a compact wireless module that communicates with the main unit.
Special Sound Effects
You can select different Sound Effects - CINEMA / SPORTS / VOICE / MUSIC / STANDARD (Original Sound) depending on the type of content you want to enjoy.
Multi-function Remote Control
You can use the supplied remote control to control various operations with the simple press of a button.
USB Host Support
You can connect and play music files from external USB storage devices such as MP3 players, USB flash memory,
etc. using the Soundbar's USB HOST function.
Bluetooth Function
You can connect a Bluetooth device to the Soundbar and enjoy music with high quality stereo sound, all without wires!
Multiroom Link
Once the Soundbar is connected to a smart device with Multiroom Link App, you can connect multiple Samsung
Multiroom devices together wirelessly.
LICENSES
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the
Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS 2.0 Channel is a trademark of DTS, Inc.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
- To send inquiries and requests regarding open sources, contact Samsung via Email ([email protected]).
2
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 2
2014-11-04
5:29:58
SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY INFORMATION
ENG
SAFETY WARNINGS
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
This symbol indicates “dangerous voltage” inside
the product that presents a risk of electric shock or
personal injury.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
This symbol indicates important instructions
accompanying the product.
WARNING : To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION : TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
• This apparatus shall always be connected to a AC outlet with a protective grounding connection.
• To disconnect the apparatus from the mains, the plug must be pulled out from the mains socket, therefore the mains plug
shall be readily operable.
CAUTION
• Do not expose this apparatus to dripping or splashing. Do not put objects filled with liquids, such as vases on the apparatus.
• To turn this apparatus off completely, you must pull the power plug out of the wall socket. Consequently, the power plug
must be easily and readily accessible at all times.
3
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 3
2014-11-04
5:29:58
SAFETY INFORMATION
PRECAUTIONS
68.6 mm
99.1mm
99.1mm
99.1mm
Ensure that the AC power supply in your house complies with the power requirements listed on the identification
sticker located on the back of your product. Install your product horizontally, on a suitable base (furniture), with
enough space around it for ventilation 7~10 cm. Make sure the ventilation slots are not covered. Do not place the
unit on amplifiers or other equipment which may become hot. This unit is designed for continuous use. To fully turn
off the unit, disconnect the AC plug from the wall outlet. Unplug the unit if you intend to leave it unused for a long
period of time.
During thunderstorms
thunderstorms, disconnect the AC plug from
fro
the wall outlet. Voltage peaks due to lightning could
damage the unit.
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight or other heat
sources.
This could lead to overheating and cause the unit to
malfunction.
Protect the product from moisture (i(i.e.
e vases)
vases), and
excess heat (e.g. a fireplace) or equipment creating
strong magnetic or electric fields. Disconnect
the power cable from the AC supply if the unit
malfunctions. Your product is not intended for industrial
use. It is for personal use only.
Condensation may occur if your product has been
stored in cold temperatures. If transporting the unit
during the winter, wait approximately 2 hours until the
unit has reached room temperature before using.
The batteries used with this product contain chem
chemicals
that are harmful to the environment.
Do not dispose of batteries in the general household
trash.
Do not dispose of batteries in a fire.
Do not short circuit, disassemble, or overheat the
batteries.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
4
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 4
2014-11-04
5:29:58
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
ENG
2
FEATURES
17 FUNCTIONS
2
Licenses
17
Input Mode
17
ARC (HDMI OUT)
3
SAFETY INFORMATION
18
Bluetooth
3
Safety Warnings
20
TV SoundConnect
4
Precautions
21
USB
22
Using the Network Standby On function
6
GETTING STARTED
22
Using the AUTO POWER LINK Function
6
Before reading the User’s Manual
23
Using the Multiroom Link
6
What’s Included
25
Software update
7
DESCRIPTIONS
26 TROUBLESHOOTING
7
Front/Bottom Panel
8
Rear Panel
27 APPENDIX
27
9
REMOTE CONTROL
9
Remote Control Buttons and Functions
Specifications
11 CONNECTIONS
11
Installing the Wall Mount
12
Detaching the Wall Mount
12
Installing the bracket without referring to
the Wall-mount Installation Guide
13
Connecting the Wireless Subwoofer
14
Attaching the Toroidal Ferrite Core to the
Soundbar Power Cord
15
Connecting an External Device using an
HDMI cable
16
Connecting an External Device using
Optical (digital) cable or Audio (analogue)
cable
16
● Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are
provided for reference only and may differ from
actual product appearance.
● An administration fee may be charged if either
(a) an engineer is called out at your request and
there is no defect with the product (i.e. where
the user manual has not been read).
(b) you bring the unit to a repair centre and there is
no defect with the product (i.e. where the user
manual has not been read).
● You will be informed of the administration fee
amount before a technician visits.
Assembling the Cable Clip
5
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 5
2014-11-04
5:29:59
GETTING STARTED
GETTING STARTED
BEFORE READING THE USER’S MANUAL
Note the following terms before reading the user manual.
+ Icons used in this manual
Icon
Term
Caution
Note
Definition
Indicates a situation where a function does not operate or settings may be canceled.
Indicates tips or instructions on the page that help you operate a function.
+ Safety Instructions and Troubleshooting
1) Be sure to familiarise yourself with the Safety Instructions before using this product. (See page 3)
2) If a problem occurs, check Troubleshooting. (See page 26)
+ Copyright
©2014 Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
All rights reserved; no part of this user’s manual may be reproduced or copied without the prior written permission of
Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd.
WHAT’S INCLUDED
Check for the supplied accessories shown below.
(Wall Mount L: 1EA)
(Wall Mount R: 1EA)
Remote Control / Lithium
Battery (3V : CR2032)
User Manual
Bracket-Wall Mount
Wall Mount Guide
(Holder-screw1: 2EA)
(For power cable 1EA)
(Holder-screw2: 2EA)
Holder-Screw
Power Cord
AUX Cable
Cable Clip
DC Adapter
Toroidal ferrite core
● The appearance of the accessories may differ slightly from the illustrations above.
6
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 6
2014-11-04
5:29:59
DESCRIPTIONS
DESCRIPTIONS
ENG
FRONT/BOTTOM PANEL
AUX IN
(Function) Button
Connect to the Analogue output
of an external device.
Selects the D.IN, AUX, HDMI, BT, TV, USB input.
● While the unit is powered on, pressing the (
)
button for more than 3 seconds sets the button to
act as MUTE button. To cancel MUTE button setup,
) button for more than 3 seconds
press the (
again.
(USB Port)
Connect USB devices such as
MP3 players here to play files on
the devices.
AUX IN
VACUUM
TUBE AMP
AUX
Display
Volume +/-
Displays the current mode.
● If there is no input from the
product or remote control for
15 seconds, the display will turn
off automatically.
● The display will not turn off
automatically in BT READY,
TV READY, and USB Playing
modes.
Controls the volume level.
The numeric value of the
volume level appears in the
front panel display.
(Power) Button
Turns the Soundbar on and off.
● When you turn on this unit, there will be a 10 to 12 second delay before it produces sound.
● Do not bring cellular phones or mobile devices near the vacuum tube amp, or put other electronic devices
on the top of the product. Signals from these devices can cause noise or distortion in the audio.
● Do not let children touch the product's surface when the set is on. It will be hot.
● Open the USB COVER to use USB or AUX port.
7
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 7
2014-11-04
5:30:01
DESCRIPTIONS
REAR PANEL
WPS/Wi-Fi SETUP Button
Press this button to connect your
Soundbar to your network using
WPS or Wi-Fi setup.
DC 24V (Power Supply In)
Connect the DC power adaptor to the
power supply jack, and then connect the
AC power adaptor plug to a wall outlet.
SPK ADD Button
Press the button to
connect Soundbar to the
HUB. (not supplied)
LAN
Lets you connect to a network
using a LAN cable.
HDMI IN
Inputs digital video and audio
signals simultaneously using an
HDMI cable. Use when connecting
a supported external device.
HDMI OUT (TV)
Outputs digital video and audio signals
simultaneously using an HDMI cable.
OPTICAL IN
Connect to the digital (optical)
output of an external device.
● When disconnecting the power cable of the AC power adaptor from the wall outlet, pull the plug. Do not
pull the cable.
● Do not connect this unit or other components to an AC outlet until all connections between components
are complete.
8
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 8
2014-11-04
5:30:09
REMOTE CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL
ENG
REMOTE CONTROL BUTTONS AND FUNCTIONS
SOURCE
Press to select a source connected to the Soundbar.
MUTE
You can turn the volume down to 0 with the push of a button.
Press again to restore the sound to the previous volume level.
REPEAT
Press to set the REPEAT function during music playback from a USB
device.
REPEAT OFF : Cancels Repeat Playback.
REPEAT FILE : Repeatedly play a track.
REPEAT ALL : Repeatedly play all tracks.
REPEAT RANDOM : Plays tracks in random order.
(A track that has already been played may be played again.)
Skip Forward
If there is more than one file on the device you are playing, and you press
the $ button, the next file is selected.
AUDIO SYNC
If the Soundbar is connected to a digital TV and the video appears out of
sync with the audio, press the AUDIO SYNC buttons to sync the audio
with the video. Use the #,$ buttons to set the audio delay between 0
ms and 300 ms. In USB mode, TV mode, and BT mode, the Audio Sync
function may not work.
Press and hold the AUDIO SYNC button on the remote for over 7 seconds
to activate Wi-Fi SETUP function.
DIMMER/Anynet+
DIMMER : Press the DIMMER/Anynet+ button to control the brightness
of the VACUUM TUBE AMP. DIMMER does not function for 30 seconds
after you turn on the product for the very first time.
Anynet+ : Press and hold the DIMMER/Anynet+ button for more than
5 seconds to turn the Anynet+ function and AUTO POWER LINK function
on or off. The Anynet+ function lets you control the Soundbar with the
remote from an Anynet+ compatible Samsung TV. The Soundbar must be
connected to the TV via an HDMI cable. See page 22 for details about
AUTO POWER LINK.
TREBLE BASS
Press to select Treble or Bass. Then, use the #,$ button to adjust the
Treble or Bass volume from -3 to +3.
● Soundbar is a Samsung proprietary name.
● Operate the TV using the TV's remote control.
9
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 9
2014-11-04
5:30:10
REMOTE CONTROL
POWER
Turns the Soundbar on and off.
VOLUME
Adjusts the volume level of the unit.
Skip Back
If there is more than one file on the device you are playing, and you press
the # button, the previous file is selected.
Play/Pause
Press the ► button to pause playing the file temporarily.
Press the ► button again to play the selected file.
SOUND EFFECT
Press to select a sound effect mode.
Select the STANDARD mode if you want to enjoy the original sound.
When you choose a Sound Effect mode (except STANDARD), Surround
Sound Expansion will automatically be turned OFF.
WOOFER
You can control the woofer volume.
Press the #,$ button to increase or decrease the subwoofer volume.
You can set it from SW -6 to SW +6.
Press and hold the WOOFER button on the remote for over 5 seconds to
activate SPK ADD function.
Surr.Sound (Surround Sound Expansion)
Press the Surr.Sound button on the remote to add depth and
spaciousness to the sound.
When you select SURROUND SOUND AUTO: If the sound source has
more than 2 channels, SURROUND SOUND ON turns on automatically.
If the sound source has 2 channels (stereo) or less, SURROUND SOUND
OFF is selected automatically.
Press and hold the Surr.Sound button on the remote for over 5 seconds to
activate WPS function.
+ Installing the Batteries in the Remote Control
1. Use a suitable coin to turn
the remote control's battery
cover counterclockwise to
remove it as shown in the
figure above.
2. Insert a 3V lithium battery. Keep the
positive (+) pole facing up when
inserting the battery. Put the battery
cover on and align the '' marks side
by side as shown in the figure above.
3. Use a suitable coin to turn the
remote control battery cover
clockwise as far as it will go to
fix it in place.
10
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 10
2014-11-04
5:30:11
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
ENG
INSTALLING THE WALL MOUNT
You can use the wall mount bracket to mount this unit on a wall.
+ Installation Precautions
● Install on a vertical wall only.
● For the installation, avoid a location with high temperature or
humidity, or a wall that cannot sustain the weight of the set.
● Check the strength of the wall. If the wall is not strong enough to
support the unit, reinforce the wall or install the unit on a different
wall that can support the unit's weight.
5 cm or more
● Purchase and use the fixing screws or anchors appropriate for the
kind of wall you have (plaster board, iron board, wood, etc.).
If possible, fix the support screws into wall studs.
● Purchase wall mounting screws according to the type and
thickness of the wall you will mount the Soundbar on.
-
Diameter : M5
-
Length: L 35 mm or longer recommended
● Connect cables from the unit to external devices before you install
it on the wall.
● Make sure the unit is turned off and unplugged before you install it.
Otherwise, it may cause an electric shock.
1. Place the installation guide against the wall surface.
•
The installation guide must be level.
•
Install at least 5 cm below the TV, if the TV is mounted on the
wall.
2. Mark the location where the screws will go through on the wall
using a pen, and then remove the installation guide.
3. Fasten the wall mounts and screws to the marked locations.
•
The left and right mounts are different shapes.
4. Secure the two holder screws to the screw holes on the back of
the Soundbar's main body, one on the left and one on the right.
AUX
5. Dust may be introduced into the Soundbar's inside if mounted on
the wall. Make sure to keep the USB COVER closed.
6. Set the holder screws on the back of the Soundbar into the
grooves of the wall mount. For safe installation, make sure to push
the holder screws all the way to the bottom of the grooves.
Using the Soundbar with Wall Mount
[Wall Mounting the Soundbar]
11
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 11
2014-11-04
5:30:12
CONNECTIONS
DETACHING THE WALL MOUNT
1. Pull the Soundbar upwards as shown in the figure to separate it
from the wall mount.
Using the Soundbar with Wall Mount
[Detaching the Soundbar from the Wall Mount]
● Do not hang onto the installed unit and avoid striking or dropping the unit.
● Secure the unit firmly to the wall so that it does not fall off. If the unit falls off, it may cause an injury or
damage the product.
● When the unit is installed on a wall, please make sure that children do not pull any of the connecting
cables, as it may cause it to fall.
● For the optimal performance of a wall mount installation, install the speaker system at least 5 cm below the
TV, if the TV is mounted on the wall.
● For your safety, if you do not mount the unit on the wall, install it on a secure, flat surface where it is unlikely to fall.
INSTALLING THE BRACKET WITHOUT REFERRING TO THE
WALL-MOUNT INSTALLATION GUIDE
5 cm or more
5 cm or more
16 cm
17.5 cm
Minimum 32.8 ~ 33.5 cm
1. Place the “Wall Mount L” on the desired wall surface while paralleled to the floor as shown above, and fix a screw
through the hole on its right end.
2. Place the “Wall Mount R” on the desired wall surface while paralleled to the floor as shown above, and fix a screw
through the hole on its left end.
•
If Wall Mount L/R are to be mounted beneath the TV, check their fixing hole positions in steps 1 and 2, so that
they are aligned appropriately to the center of the TV’s bottom.
3. Fix screws through the rest of holes.
12
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 12
2014-11-04
5:30:13
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTING THE WIRELESS SUBWOOFER
1. Plug the power cords of the main unit and subwoofer
into an AC wall outlet.
2. Confirm that the main unit is off (in STANDBY Mode).
3. Press the ID SET button on the back of the
subwoofer with a small, pointed object for 5
seconds.
•
The LINK indicator (Blue LED) on the subwoofer
blinks quickly.
4. While the main unit is powered off (in STANDBY
) on the
mode), press and hold the MUTE (
remote control for 5 seconds.
ENG
The Subwoofer's linking ID is preset at the factory and the main unit and subwoofer should link (connect wirelessly)
automatically when the main unit and subwoofer are turned on. If the LINK indicator does not light when the main unit
and subwoofer are turned on, please set the ID by following the procedure below. Complete this process within 30
seconds after the Link Indicator on the subwoofer starts blinking.
● Before moving or installing the product, be
sure to turn off the power and disconnect the
power cord.
● If the main unit is powered off, the wireless
subwoofer will be in standby mode and the
STANDBY LED on the upper side will come
on after the LINK indicator (Blue LED) blinks
for 30 seconds.
● If you use a device that uses the same
frequency (2.4GHz) as the Soundbar near the
Soundbar, interference may cause some
sound interruption.
5. The ID SET message appears on the Soundbar's
display.
6. To finalise the link, turn the main unit’s power on while
the subwoofer’s LINK LED blinks.
•
The main unit and the subwoofer should now be
linked (connected).
•
The LINK indicator (blue LED) on the subwoofer
should be on and solid blue.
•
If the LINK indicator is not solid blue, the linking
process has failed. Turn off the main unit and
start again from Step 2.
•
You can enjoy better sound from the wireless
subwoofer by selecting a Sound Effect.
(See page 10)
● The transmission distance of the wireless
signal between the main unit and subwoofer
is about 10 m, but may vary depending on
your operating environment.
If a steel-concrete or metallic wall is between
the main unit and the wireless subwoofer, the
system may not operate at all, because the
wireless signal cannot penetrate metal.
● If the main unit doesn't make a wireless
connection, follow steps 1-6 in the left hand
column to re-set the connection between the
main unit and wireless subwoofer.
● The wireless receiving antenna is built into the
wireless subwoofer. Keep the unit away from
water and moisture.
● For optimal listening performance, make sure
that the area around the wireless subwoofer
location is clear of any obstructions.
13
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 13
2014-11-04
5:30:14
CONNECTIONS
ATTACHING THE TOROIDAL FERRITE CORE TO THE
SOUNDBAR POWER CORD
You can reduce noise caused by electromagnetic radiation by fitting the ferrite core to the your Soundbar power cord.
1. Unlock and open the ferrite core.
<Soundbar Power Cable>
2. Wind the Soundbar power cable around the ferrite
core twice.
(Start winding 5 to 10 cm away from the core).
3. Close the ferrite core by pressing it until it clicks.
14
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 14
2014-11-04
5:30:16
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE USING AN HDMI
CABLE
HDMI IN
ENG
HDMI is the standard digital interface for connecting to such TVs, projectors, DVD players, Blu-ray players, set top
boxes, and more.
Because HDMI transmits the highest quality digital signal, you can enjoy superior video and audio - as it was originally
created at the digital source.
HDMI OUT
Digital Devices
HDMI Cable
(not supplied)
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT (TV)
HDMI Cable
(not supplied)
HDMI IN
ARC (HDMI OUT)
Connect an HDMI cable (not supplied) from the HDMI
IN jack on the back of the product to the HDMI OUT
jack on your digital device.
The ARC function allows digital audio to output via the
HDMI OUT (ARC) port.
It can be enabled only when the Soundbar is connected
to a TV that supports the ARC function.
and,
● Anynet+ must be turned on.
● This function is not available if the HDMI
cable does not support ARC.
HDMI OUT (TV)
Connect an HDMI cable (not supplied) from the HDMI
OUT (TV) jack on the back of the product to the HDMI
IN jack on your TV.
● HDMI is an interface that enables the digital
transmission of video and audio data with
just a single connector.
15
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 15
2014-11-04
5:30:16
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL DEVICE USING OPTICAL
(DIGITAL) CABLE OR AUDIO (ANALOGUE) CABLE
This unit comes equipped with one optical in digital jack and one audio Analogue in jack, giving you two ways to
connect it to a TV.
OPTICAL
OUT
OPTICAL IN
Optical Cable
(not supplied)
BD/ DVD player/
Set-top box/
Game console
AUDIO
OUT
AUX IN
Audio Cable
OPTICAL IN
or,
Connect the OPTICAL IN (Audio) on the main unit to
the OPTICAL OUT jack of the TV or Source Device.
Change the function to D.IN.
AUX IN
Connect AUX IN (Audio) on the main unit to the AUDIO
OUT jack of the TV or Source Device.
Change the function to AUX.
● Do not connect the power cord of this
product or your TV to the wall outlet until all
connections between components are
complete.
● Before moving or installing this product, be
sure to turn off the power and disconnect the
power cord.
ASSEMBLING THE CABLE CLIP
DC 24V
DC 24V
Attach the cable clip to the unit as
shown, and then run the cables
through the clip to keep them neat.
16
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 16
2014-11-04
5:30:17
FUNCTIONS
FUNCTIONS
ENG
INPUT MODE
Press the (
) button on the main unit’s front panel or the
mode you want.
Input mode
Display
Optical Digital input
D.IN
AUX input
AUX
HDMI input
HDMI
BLUETOOTH mode
BT
TV SoundConnect
TV
USB mode
USB
(SOURCE) button on the remote control to select the
+ Auto Power Down function
The unit turns off automatically in the following situations:
● D.IN/HDMI/BT/TV/USB/ARC Mode
-
If there is no audio signal for 15 minutes.
● AUX Mode
-
If the AUX cable is disconnected for 15 minutes.
-
If there is no KEY input for 8 hours when the AUX
cable is connected. (Auto Power Down function
can be turned off only in that case.)
To turn off Auto Power Down function, while in AUX
mode, press and hold the & button for 5 seconds.
AUTO POWER DOWN ON / OFF appears on the
display.
ARC (HDMI OUT)
ARC (Audio Return Channel) transfers digital audio signal to the HDMI OUT (ARC) port.
HDMI Cable
1. Connect the TV supporting ARC to the Soundbar with an HDMI cable.
2. Turn on the TV, and turn on the Soundbar’s Anynet+.
) button on the main unit’s front panel or the
3. Press the (
the D.IN mode.
(SOURCE) button on the remote control to select
● If the HDMI cable does not support ARC feature, ARC may not work properly.
● To turn off the ARC function, turn Anynet+ off.
17
FUNCTIONS
BLUETOOTH
You can connect a Bluetooth device to the Soundbar and enjoy music with high quality stereo sound, all without wires!
+ To connect the Soundbar to a Bluetooth device
Check if the Bluetooth device supports the Bluetooth compliant stereo headset function.
Connect
Bluetooth device
1. Press the (
) button on the main unit’s front panel
(SOURCE) button on the remote control
or the
to select the BT mode.
● If asked for PIN code when connecting a
Bluetooth device, enter <0000>.
● Only one Bluetooth device can be paired at a
time.
● The Bluetooth connection will be terminated
when you turn the Soundbar off.
● The Soundbar may not perform Bluetooth
search or connection correctly under the
following circumstances:
- If there is a strong electrical field around
the Soundbar.
2. Select the Bluetooth menu on the Bluetooth device
you want to connect. (Refer to the Bluetooth
device's user manual.)
3. Select the Stereo headset menu on the Bluetooth
device.
•
You will see a list of scanned devices.
4. Select "[Samsung] Soundbar" from the list.
•
•
•
When the Soundbar is connected to the
Bluetooth device, it will display BT READY 
[Bluetooth Device Name]  BT on the front
display.
- If several Bluetooth devices are
simultaneously paired with the Soundbar.
- If the Bluetooth device is turned off, not in
place, or malfunctions.
The device name can only be displayed in
English. An underline " _ " will be displayed if the
name is not in English.
- Note that such devices as microwave
ovens, wireless LAN adaptors, fluorescent
lights, and gas stoves use the same
frequency range as the Bluetooth device,
which can cause electric interference.
If the Bluetooth device has failed to pair with the
Soundbar, delete the previous "[Samsung]
Soundbar" found by the Bluetooth device and
have it search for the Soundbar again.
● The Soundbar supports SBC data (44.1kHz,
48kHz).
● Connect only to a Bluetooth device that
supports the A2DP (AV) function.
● You cannot connect the Soundbar to a
Bluetooth device that supports only the HF
(Hands Free) function.
5. Play music on the connected device.
•
You can listen to the music playing on the
connected Bluetooth device over the Soundbar.
•
In BT mode, the Play/Pause/Next/Prev functions
are not available. However, these functions are
available in Bluetooth devices supporting AVRCP.
18
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 18
2014-11-04
5:30:29
FUNCTIONS
+ To disconnect the Bluetooth device from the Soundbar
You can disconnect the Bluetooth device from the Soundbar. For instructions, see the Bluetooth device's user manual.
● When the Soundbar is disconnected from the Bluetooth device, the Soundbar will display BT DISCONNECTED
on the front display.
ENG
● The Soundbar will be disconnected.
+ To disconnect the Soundbar from the Bluetooth device
Press the
(SOURCE) button on the remote control or the (
from BT to another mode or turn off the Soundbar.
) button on the product's front panel to switch
● The connected Bluetooth device will wait a certain amount of time for a response from the Soundbar before
terminating the connection. (Disconnection time may differ, depending on the Bluetooth device)
● In Bluetooth connection mode, the Bluetooth connection will be lost if the distance between the Soundbar
and the Bluetooth device exceeds 5 m.
● The Soundbar automatically turns off after 15 minutes in the Ready state.
More About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a technology that enables Bluetooth-compliant devices to interconnect easily with each other using a
short wireless connection.
● A Bluetooth device may cause noise or malfunction, depending on usage, when:
-
A part of your body is in contact with the receiving/transmitting system of the Bluetooth device or the
Soundbar.
-
It is subject to electrical variation from obstructions caused by a wall, corner, or office partition.
-
It is exposed to electrical interference from same frequency-band devices including medical equipment,
microwave ovens, and wireless LANs.
● Pair the Soundbar with the Bluetooth device while they are close together.
● The further the distance between the Soundbar and Bluetooth device, the worse the quality is.
If the distance exceeds the Bluetooth operational range, the connection is lost.
● In poor reception areas, the Bluetooth connection may not work properly.
● The Bluetooth connection only works when it is close to the unit. The connection will be automatically cut off if the
Bluetooth device is out of range. Even within range, the sound quality may be degraded by obstacles such as
walls or doors.
● This wireless device may cause electric interference during its operation.
19
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 19
2014-11-04
5:30:41
FUNCTIONS
TV SOUNDCONNECT
You can enjoy TV sound through your Soundbar when it is connected to a Samsung TV that supports the TV
SoundConnect function.
+ Connecting a TV to the Soundbar
Connect
1. Turn on the TV and Soundbar.
•
Turn on the menu of the TV.
•
Move to Speaker Settings on "Sound" tab.
•
Set the "Add New Device" menu to "On".
● The TV SoundConnect (SoundShare) function
is supported by some Samsung TVs released
from 2012 on. Check whether your TV
supports the TV SoundConnect
(SoundShare) function before you begin.
(For further information, refer to the TV’s user
manual.)
● If your Samsung TV was released before
2014, check the SoundShare setting menu.
● If the distance between the TV and Soundbar
exceeds 5 m, the connection may not be
stable or the audio may stutter. If this occurs,
relocate the TV or Soundbar so that they are
within operational range, and then
re-establish the TV SoundConnect
connection.
● TV SoundConnect Operational Ranges:
- Recommended pairing range:
within 50 cm
2. Press the (
) button on the main unit’s front panel
(SOURCE) button on the remote control
or the
to select the TV mode.
3. On the TV, a message asking whether to enable the
TV SoundConnect function. "[Samsung]
Soundbar" is displayed on the TV screen.
4. Select <Yes> to finish connecting the TV and
Soundbar by TV remote control.
● Switching the Soundbar’s mode from TV to
another mode automatically terminates
TV SoundConnect.
● To connect the Soundbar to another TV, the
existing connection must be terminated.
● Terminate the connection to the existing TV,
and then press the ► button on the remote
control for 5 seconds to connect to another
TV.
- Recommended operational range:
within 5 m
● The Play/Pause, Next, Prev buttons are not
operable in TV SoundConnect mode.
20
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 20
2014-11-04
5:30:41
FUNCTIONS
USB
You can play music files located on USB storage devices through the Soundbar.
ENG
USB port
Display
1. Connect the USB device to the USB port of the
product.
● Do not remove the USB device while it is transferring
files.
) button on the main unit’s front panel
2. Press the (
(SOURCE) button on the remote control
or the
to select the USB mode.
● DRM-protected music files (MP3, WMA) from
commercial web sites cannot be played.
3. USB appears on the display screen.
● Mobile phone devices are not supported.
● External HDDs are not supported.
● File Format Type Compatibility list:
•
The Soundbar connection to the USB device is
complete.
•
The Soundbar automatically turns off (Auto
Power Off) if no USB device has been connected
for more than 15 minutes.
Format
*.mp3
MPEG 1 Layer3
MPEG 2 Layer3
MPEG 2.5 Layer3
+ Before you connect a USB
device
*.wma
Be aware of the following:
Wave_Format_MSAudio1
Wave_Format_MSAudio2
AAC
● If the file name of a file or folder on a USB device
exceeds 10 characters, it is not displayed on the
Soundbar's display.
*.aac
AAC-LC
HE-AAC
● This product may not be compatible with certain
types of USB storage media.
● The Soundbar supports the FAT16 and FAT32 file
systems.
-
Codec
MPEG 1 Layer2
*.wav
-
*.ogg
OGG 1.1.0
*.flac
FLAC 1.1.0, FLAC 1.2.1
 Supported Sampling Rate above 16KHz
The NTFS file system is not supported.
● Connect USB devices directly to the USB port of the
product. Otherwise, you may encounter a USB
compatibility problem.
● Do not connect multiple storage devices to the
product via a multi-card reader. It may not operate
properly.
● Digital camera PTP protocols are not supported.
21
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 21
2014-11-04
5:30:48
FUNCTIONS
USING THE NETWORK STANDBY ON FUNCTION
The Network Standby On function becomes available if wireless connection was properly established between the
smart device and Soundbar. This function turns on the Soundbar automatically when a smart device attempts to
connect to the Soundbar via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi. If the Soundbar was turned on via Bluetooth connection, its input
mode is set to BT automatically. Turning on the Soundbar via Wi-Fi is available only by using the App. For further
information, refer to the Web manual.
4. Connect the Smart device to your Soundbar.
5. Turn the Network Standby On function on by pressing the $ button on the Soundbar remote for more than
5 seconds. You can turn the function off by pressing the $ button again for more than 5 seconds.
● Available only if the Soundbar is listed among the Smart device’s paired devices.
(The Smart device and the Soundbar must have been previously paired at least once.)
● Soundbar will appear in the Smart device’s searched devices list only when the Soundbar is displaying
[BT READY] or [WiFi READY].
● In the TV SoundConnect mode, the Soundbar cannot be paired to another Smart device.
● If Network Standby On function did not work
- The Network Standby On is set to Off.
● Wi-Fi connection to the Soundbar will be terminated if its power cord was disconnected or the power was
cut off. Turn on the Soundbar and reconnect.
USING THE AUTO POWER LINK FUNCTION
If Soundbar was connected to an external device with optical cable, AUTO POWER LINK function can be used.
If you connect the main unit to a TV with a digital optical cable, set the Auto Power function ON to have the Soundbar
turn on automatically when you turn the TV on.
1. Connect the Soundbar and an External Device with
an Optical cable.
2. Press and hold the DIMMER/Anynet+ button for
over 5 seconds to toggle the function.
AUTO POWER LINK
Display
ON
ANYNET+ OFF /
POWER LINK ON
OFF
ANYNET+ ON /
POWER LINK OFF
22
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 22
2014-11-04
5:31:01
FUNCTIONS
USING THE MULTIROOM LINK
+ Before you begin
ENG
Once the Soundbar is connected to a smart device with Multiroom Link App, you can connect multiple Samsung
Multiroom devices together wirelessly.
Communication Basics
Smart Device:
Android or iOS
(App Control)
Intrenet
Wireless Router
1. Requirements: Wireless Router, Smart Device
2. The wireless router should be connected to the Internet.
3. The smart device should be connected to the router via a Wi-Fi connection.
+ Installing the Samsung Multiroom App
To use the Soundbar, you must download and then install the Samsung Multiroom App by accessing the app through
Google play or the App Store. With the Samsung Multiroom App installed, you can play music stored in your smart
device, from connected devices and other content providers, and from Internet radio stations.
Android or iOS
Accessing the Samsung Multiroom App
Download the Samsung Multiroom app from Google
Play or the App Store of your smart device.
To access the Samsung Multiroom app, press the
Multiroom app icon on your smart device.
*
Market search : Samsung Multiroom
zˆ”šœ•Ž
tœ“›™––”
or
ANDROID APP ON
23
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 23
2014-11-04
5:31:01
FUNCTIONS
+ Connecting with Soundbar
Connect the Soundbar to a wired/wireless router. Wired or wireless connection (using Wi-Fi SETUP or WPS, you can
see the guide on Multiroom APP) to the router can be established.
Connecting the Soundbar to Your Network with a LAN Cable
Plug In
LAN
Wireless Router
1. Connect your smart device to your Wi-Fi network.
2. On your Smart device, select the Samsung Multiroom app. Setup starts.
3. In the app, select "I don’t have a Hub", and then press Next. On the next screen, select Soundbar from the
device type, and then press Next.
4. Select Wired from the network type, and then press Next.
5. Connect one end of the LAN cable to the Soundbar’s LAN port. Connect the other end to your wireless router.
(You cannot use the Soundbar without a wireless router.)
6. Plug the Soundbar into an electrical outlet.
● For further information on connecting the Soundbar with a wired/wireless router, refer to the manual on the
Web.
● For further information on connecting the product for Multiroom Link, please refer to the web-based user
manual or manual provided within the app.
- Web manual : www.Samsung.com  Support  Product name search  HW-H750 or HW-H751 PDF
file download.
24
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 24
2014-11-04
5:31:02
FUNCTIONS
SOFTWARE UPDATE
Samsung may offer updates for the Soundbar's system
firmware in the future.
If an update is offered, you can update the firmware by
connecting a USB device with the firmware update
stored on it to the USB port on your Soundbar.
Note that if there are multiple update files, you must load
them onto the USB device singly and use them to
update the firmware one file at a time.
Please visit Samsung.com or contact the Samsung call
center to receive more information about downloading
updates files.
1. While the Soundbar is turned off, connect the USB
storage device that contains the updating firmware
to the Soundbar’s USB port.
+ Auto update
2. Turn on the Soundbar UPDATE appears on the
display and updating begins within 3 minutes.
Even when the Soundbar is turned off, the Soundbar will
automatically check latest software version and continue
to update if it was connected to the Internet.
•
ENG
+ Updating with USB
● Updating firmware may not work properly if
audio files supported by the Soundbar are
stored in the USB storage device.
● Do not disconnect the power or remove the
USB device while updates are being applied.
The main unit will turn off automatically after
completing the firmware update.
● After reset, all settings are reset to their
factory default settings. We recommend you
write down your settings so that you can
easily reset them after the update.
Note that updating firmware resets
subwoofer connection too. If connection to
the subwoofer is not established
automatically after resetting, refer to page 13.
If the firmware fails to update, we
recommend formatting the USB device in
FAT16 and trying again.
● Do not format the USB device in the NTFS
format. The Soundbar does not support the
NTFS file system.
● Depending on the manufacturer, some USB
devices may not be supported.
Upon completion of updating, the Soundbar
turns off and on automatically.
● The Soundbar is configured to run auto
update by default.
● To use auto update function, the Soundbar
must be connected to the Internet.
● Wi-Fi connection to the Soundbar will be
terminated if its power cord was
disconnected or the power was cut off. Turn
on the Soundbar and reconnect.
If UPDATE was not displayed
1. Turn off the Soundbar, connect the USB storage
device that contains update files to the Soundbar’s
USB port.
2. Disconnect the power cord, reconnect it and turn it
on.
25
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 25
2014-11-04
5:31:03
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Before requesting service, please check the following.
The unit will not turn on.
• Is the power cord plugged into the outlet?
 Connect the power plug to the outlet.
A function does not work when the button is pressed.
• Is there static electricity in the air?
 Disconnect the power plug and connect it again.
Sound is not produced.
• Is the Mute function on?
 Press the Mute button to cancel the function.
• Is the volume set to minimum?
 Adjust the Volume.
The remote control does not work.
• Are the batteries drained?
 Replace with new batteries.
• Is the distance between the remote control and main
unit too far?
 Move closer to the unit.
The TV SoundConnect (TV pairing) failed.
• Does your TV support TV SoundConnect?
 TV SoundConnect is supported by some Samsung
TVs released from 2012 on. Check your TV to see if it
supports TV SoundConnect.
• Is your TV firmware the latest version?
 Update your TV with the latest firmware.
• Does an error occur when connecting?
 Contact the Samsung call centre.
• Reset the TV MODE and connect again.
 Press and hold the ► button for 5 seconds to reset
the TV SoundConnect connection.
The red LED on the subwoofer blinks and the subwoofer is not producing sound.
• Your subwoofer may not be connected to the main
body of the product.
 Try to connect your subwoofer again.
(See Page 13)
The subwoofer drones and vibrates noticeably.
• Try to adjust the vibration of your subwoofer.
 Press the WOOFER button on your remote control
to adjust its value (between SW-6 and SW+6).
26
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 26
2014-11-04
5:31:10
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
ENG
SPECIFICATIONS
Model name
HW-H760
USB
5V/0.5A
Main Unit
3.3 kg
Subwoofer (PS-WH760)
9.8 kg
Main Unit
943 x 123 x 57 mm
Subwoofer (PS-WH760)
305.5 x 388.5 x 305.5 mm
Weight
GENERAL
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Operating Temperature Range
+5 °C to +35 °C
Operating Humidity Range
10 % to 75 %
Rated Output
Power
AMPLIFIER
Main Front
40W/CH, 6 OHM, THD = 1%, 1kHz
Main Bottom
40W/CH, 6 OHM, THD = 1%, 1kHz
Subwoofer (PS-WH760)
160W, 3 OHM, THD = 10%, 100Hz
S/N Ratio (Analogue Input)
65 dB
Separation (1kHz)
65 dB
*
S/N ratio, distortion, separation, and usable sensitivity are based on measurements using AES (Audio Engineering
Society) guidelines.
*
Nominal specification
-
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd reserves the right to change the specifications without notice.
-
Weight and dimensions are approximate.
-
For the power supply and Power Consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
a Open Source License Notice
For further information on Open Sources used in this product, please visit the website:
http://opensource.samsung.com
a
-
License
The Spotify Software is subject to third party licenses found here : www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses.
For more information about Spotify Connect, please visit www.spotify.com/connect
27
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141110.indd 27
2014-11-10
4:33:25
Contact SAMSUNG WORLD WIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contact the SAMSUNG customer care
Centre.
Contact Centre 
Area
` Asia Pacific
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
` MENA
U.A.E
OMAN
KUWAIT
BAHRAIN
QATAR
EGYPT
ALGERIA
PAKISTAN
TUNISIA
JORDAN
SYRIA
IRAN
MOROCCO
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858
(852) 3698 4698
1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free
1800 266 8282 - Toll Free
30308282 - Non Toll Free
0800112888
021-56997777
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT]
1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline and Mobile]
02-4222111 [Other landline]
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0-2689-3232,
1800-29-3232
0800-32-9999
1800 588 889
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
183-2255 (183-CALL)
8000-4726
800-2255 (800-CALL)
08000-726786
16580
021 36 11 00
0800-Samsung (72678)
80-1000-12
0800-22273
06 5777444
18252273
021-8255
080 100 2255
SAUDI ARABIA
920021230
TURKEY
` Africa
NIGERIA
444 77 11
Ghana
Cote D’ Ivoire
SENEGAL
CAMEROON
KENYA
UGANDA
TANZANIA
RWANDA
BURUNDI
DRC
SUDAN
SOUTH AFRICA
BOTSWANA
NAMIBIA
ZAMBIA
MOZAMBIQUE
0800-726-7864
0800-10077
0302-200077
8000 0077
800-00-0077
7095- 0077
0800 545 545
0800 300 300
0685 88 99 00
9999
200
499999
1969
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864)
8007260000
08 197 267 864
0211 350370
847267864 / 827267864
HW-H760_HC_ENG_141104.indd 28
Web Site
www.samsung.com/au/support
www.samsung.com/nz/support
www.samsung.com/cn/support
www.samsung.com/hk/support (Chinese)
www.samsung.com/hk_en/support (English)
www.samsung.com/in/support
www.samsung.com/id/support
www.samsung.com/jp/support
www.samsung.com/my/support
www.samsung.com/ph/support
www.samsung.com/sg/support
www.samsung.com/th/support
www.samsung.com/tw/support
www.samsung.com/vn/support
www.samsung.com/ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/ae_ar/support (Arabic)
www.samsung.com/eg/support
www.samsung.com/n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/pk/support
www.samsung.com/n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English)
www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English)
www.samsung.com/iran/support
www.samsung.com/n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/sa/support
www.samsung.com/sa_en/support (English)
www.samsung.com/tr/support
www.samsung.com/africa_en/support
www.samsung.com/africa_fr/support
www.samsung.com/support
www.samsung.com/support
2014-11-04
5:31:10
‫‪HW-H760‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫‪Wireless Audio - Soundbar‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﺻﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺟﺳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺑﺕ ﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﻣﻧﻭﻧﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﺛﺑﺕ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/register‬‬
‫‪AH68-02769A-00‬‬
‫‪5:37:32‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪AH68-02769A-00‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 1‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮔﻭﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﻭی ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺭﺍﻫﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ‪ ARC‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮔﻭﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺭﺍﻫﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ARC‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Surround Sound Expansion‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺗﻭﺳﻌﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺳﻭﺭﺍﻧﺩ ﻋﻣﻕ ﻭ ﻓﺿﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺧﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺳﻌﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺳﻭﺭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Sonic Emotion‬ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﺷﯽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻧﻣﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺩﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺟﻣﻊ ﻭ ﺟﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻭﻳژﻩ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﺍﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻧﻳﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻟﺫﺕ ﺑﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﯽ ‪) CINEMA -‬ﺳﻳﻧﻣﺎ( ‪) SPORTS /‬ﻭﺭﺯﺷﯽ( ‪/‬‬
‫‪) VOICE‬ﺻﺩﺍ( ‪) MUSIC /‬ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ( ‪) STANDARD /‬ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ( )ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ( ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﭼﻧﺩﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﺎﺳﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ ،MP3‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎﺳﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻟﺫﺕ ﺑﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺑﺎﻻی ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ!‬
‫‪Multiroom Link‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Multiroom Link‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﻬﻡ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺗﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻣﺗﻳﺎﺯ ‪ .Dolby Laboratories‬ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ‪ Dolby‬ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺭﻑ ‪ D‬ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ‪ Dolby Laboratories‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺷﻣﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺛﺑﺕ ‪ DTS‬ﺑﻪ ‪ http://patents.dts.com‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﻟﻳﺩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻟﻳﺳﺎﻧﺱ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ،DTS .DTS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ DTS‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﺁﻥ ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﻭﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ DTS 2.0 Channel‬ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻪ ‪ DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪ HDMI) HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻭﺍﺳﻁ ﭼﻧﺩﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺑﺎﻻ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﺋﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﺛﺑﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ‪ HDMI Licensing LLC‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﺣﺩﻩ ﺁﻣﺭﻳﮑﺎ ﻭ ﮐﺷﻭﺭﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﺅﺍﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺩﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻳﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ )‪ ([email protected]‬ﺑﺎ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬‫ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪5:37:36‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺕ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺩﺭﭘﻭﺵ )ﻳﺎ ﭘﺷﺕ( ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻳﭻ ﻗﻁﻌﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺻﺭﻑ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺕ ﺗﻌﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﺳﻧﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺕ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ "ﻭﻟﺗﺎژ ﺧﻁﺭﻧﺎک" ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻬﻡ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭ ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺁﺗﺵ ﺳﻭﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﻠﻭﮔﻳﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻳﻐﻪ ﭘﻬﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ‬
‫• ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺷﺵ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﭘﺭ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﮔﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺁﻧﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻣﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﻁﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﻫﻣﻳﺷﻪ ﺑﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪5:37:36‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﯽ‬
‫‪68.6 mm‬‬
‫‪99.1mm‬‬
‫‪99.1mm‬‬
‫‪99.1mm‬‬
‫ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺫﮐﺭ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﭘﺷﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺭ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ )ﻣﻳﺯ( ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺿﺎی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮔﺭﺩﺵ ﻫﻭﺍ ‪ ۷‬ﺍﻟﯽ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﮑﺎﻑ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﮔﺭﺩﺵ ﻫﻭﺍ ﭘﻭﺷﺎﻧﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻣﭘﻠﻳﻔﺎﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺩﺍﻭﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺩﺕ ﻁﻭﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺁﻧﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﻁﻭﻓﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻋﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺎژﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﺭﻋﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺵ ﻧﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺧﻭﺭﺷﻳﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﺍﻣﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺟﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ ﮔﺭﻡ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺹ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ )ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﮔﮔﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﻫﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﮔﮔﺭﻣﺎی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ )ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺷﻭﻣﻳﻧﻪ( ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻳﺩﺍﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻗﻭی ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭﺩ ﺻﻧﻌﺗﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻅﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻪ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻑ ﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻭﻉ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﺳﺗﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺻﺑﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺣﺎﻭی ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺷﻳﻣﻳﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮕ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺯﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺿﺭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻟﻪ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﻋﻣﻭﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺗﺵ ﻧﻳﻧﺩﺍﺯﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﮐﻭﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪5:37:36‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 4‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﻣﻁﺎﻟﺏ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻭﺯ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪ ۱۷‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫‪(HDMI OUT) ARC‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻫﺷﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﯽ‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪Network Standby On‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪AUTO POWER LINK‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Multiroom Link‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭼﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫‪۲۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﺡ‬
‫‪ ۲۶‬ﻋﻳﺏ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﭘﺷﺕ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ۲۷‬ﺿﻣﻳﻣﻪ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﻓﻧﯽ‬
‫‪ ۱۱‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﺍﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‬
‫‪۱۴‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﻳﻡ ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺳﺗﻪ ﻓﺭﻳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ‬
‫‪Soundbar‬‬
‫‪۱۵‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪۱۶‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﻧﻭﺭی‬
‫)ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ( ﻳﺎ ﺻﺩﺍ )ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻭگ(‬
‫‪۱۶‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﮔﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪5:37:37‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 5‬‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻭﺍﻧﺩﻥ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﻧﻣﺎﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻁﻼﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺫﮐﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩی ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺗﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻐﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺭﺩ ﻫﺭﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻣﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻳﺏ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﻭﺭﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﺁﺷﻧﺎ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ(‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﺷﮑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺧﺵ ﻋﻳﺏ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ‪ ۲۶‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ(‬
‫_ ﮐﭘﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺕ‬
‫©‪.Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd 2014‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻳﻪ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﺍﺳﺕ؛ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻗﺳﻣﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺟﻭﺯ ﮐﺗﺑﯽ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ‪ Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd‬ﺑﺎﺯﺁﻓﺭﻳﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭼﻪ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ‪(1EA :L‬‬
‫)ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ‪(1EA :R‬‬
‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻟﻳﺗﻳﻭﻡ )‪(CR2032 : 3V‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫)ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ‪-‬ﭘﻳﭻ‪(2EA :1‬‬
‫)ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺭ ‪(1EA‬‬
‫)ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ‪-‬ﭘﻳﭻ‪(2EA :2‬‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ‪-‬ﭘﻳﭻ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪AUX‬‬
‫ﮔﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺳﺗﻪ ﻓﺭﻳﺕ‬
‫● ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺷﮑﻝ ﻟﻭﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﯽ ﮐﻣﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺻﺎﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪5:37:38‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 6‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﺡ‬
‫ﺷﺭﺡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺭ‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻭگ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ‪ USB ،TV ،BT ،HDMI ،AUX ،D.IN‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )‬
‫( ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ ۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪) MUTE‬ﺑﻳﺻﺩﺍ( ﻋﻣﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻟﻐﻭ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪) MUTE‬ﺑﻳﺻﺩﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )‬
‫( ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪(USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ USB‬ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP3‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺟﺎ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﭘﻠﻳﻔﺎﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻟﻪ ﺧﻼ‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ‪+/-‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﮐﻧﻭﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ‪ ۱۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪،BT READY‬‬
‫‪ TV READY‬ﻭ ﭘﺧﺵ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻋﺩﺩی ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭ ﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ(‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻭﺵ ﺑﺭﺳﺩ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺗﺎﺧﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﺎی ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺑﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻣﭘﻠﻳﻔﺎﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻟﻪ ﺧﻼ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻳﻥ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻧﻭﻳﺯ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﻭﺩﮐﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺳﺕ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻳﺎ ‪ AUX‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫‪5:37:39‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 7‬‬
‫ﺷﺭﺡ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﭘﺷﺕ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪WPS/Wi-Fi SETUP‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ‪ WPS‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DC 24V‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺑﺭﻕ(‬
‫ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻳﺵ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪SPK ADD‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ(‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎی ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪(TV) HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ )ﻧﻭﺭی( ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺗﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﺟﺯﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﮑﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺯﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫‪5:37:48‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 8‬‬
‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪MUTE‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ ۰‬ﮐﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪REPEAT‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ‪ REPEAT‬ﺩﺭ ﻁﯽ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : REPEAT OFF‬ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﮑﺭﺭ ﻟﻐﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : REPEAT FILE‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺭﺍک ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﮑﺭﺭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : REPEAT ALL‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﺭﺍﮐﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﮑﺭﺭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : REPEAT RANDOM‬ﺗﺭﺍک ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﺭﺍﮐﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺑﻼً ﭘﺧﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ $‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUDIO SYNC‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭ ﺻﺩﺍی ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻫﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻳﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻫﻡ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ AUDIO SYNC‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 300‬ﻣﻳﻠﯽ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ #،$‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫‪ ،USB‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ TV‬ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ ،BT‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺻﺩﺍ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi SETUP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ AUDIO SYNC‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۷‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪DIMMER/Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ : DIMMER‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ DIMMER/Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺭﻭﺷﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺁﻣﭘﻠﻳﻔﺎﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻼ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺧﺳﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ DIMMER ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Anynet+‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ DIMMER/Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ AUTO POWER LINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺷﻣﺎ ﻓﺭﺍﻫﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺟﺯﻳﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ AUTO POWER LINK‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ‪ ۲۲‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪TREBLE BASS‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺯﻳﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻡ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ # ،$‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺻﺩﺍی‬
‫ﺯﻳﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻡ ﺍﺯ ‪ -3‬ﺗﺎ ‪ +3‬ﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Soundbar‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺣﺻﺎﺭی ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫‪5:37:49‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 9‬‬
‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺩ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻋﻘﺏ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺧﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ #‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺧﺵ‪/‬ﻣﮑﺙ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻣﮑﺙ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ & ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﭘﺧﺵ ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ & ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOUND EFFECT‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮔﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ STANDARD‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ )ﺑﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺳﻌﻪ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺳﻭﺭﺍﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪WOOFER‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍی ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﺍﻳﺵ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺵ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ # ،$‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻠﻧﺩی ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ SW -6‬ﺗﺎ ‪ SW +6‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ SPK ADD‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ WOOFER‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪(Surround Sound Expansion) Surr.Sound‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻕ ﻭ ﻭﺳﻌﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ Surr.Sound‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ SURROUND SOUND AUTO‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ SURROUND SOUND ON ،‬ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ‪ ۲‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ )ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ( ﻳﺎ ﮐﻣﺗﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ SURROUND SOUND OFF ،‬ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻫﻣﭼﻧﻳﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ WPS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ Surr.Sound‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻫﻣﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﭘﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺳﮑﻪ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺎﻟﻑ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﻋﻘﺭﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﻋﺕ‬
‫ﺑﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻟﻳﺗﻳﻭﻡ ‪ ۳‬ﻭﻟﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﮔﺫﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﺗﺭی‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻁﺏ )‪ (+‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﭘﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﭘﻬﻠﻭ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻬﻠﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺕ '‪ '‬ﺗﺭﺍﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺩﺭﭘﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺳﮑﻪ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺕ ﺣﺭﮐﺕ ﻋﻘﺭﺑﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﺑﭼﺭﺧﺎﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫‪5:37:50‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 10‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﯽ ﻧﺻﺏ‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻁ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻣﻭﺩی ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻳﺳﺕ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩﺭﺕ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺕ ﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻭﻳﺕ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺁﻧﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻧﺻﺏ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻧﺱ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ )ﺭﻭﮐﺵ ﮔﭼﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﻫﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﭼﻭﺑﯽ ﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﻩ( ﺧﺭﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺭﻭﻓﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺿﺧﺎﻣﺕ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﺑﺧﺭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﻁﺭ‪M5 :‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻁﻭﻝ ‪ ۳۵‬ﻣﻳﻠﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‬
‫● ﭘﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻧﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭘﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺻﺏ ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺑﻭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺁﻧﺭﺍ ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﺍﻳﻧﺻﻭﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﻁﺭ ﺑﺭﻕ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﮕﯽ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻁﺢ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ ﺯﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﻣﺣﻝ ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻠﻡ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﮕﺫﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺩﺱ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻋﻼﻣﺗﮕﺫﺍﺭی ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﮑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼپ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻫﻡ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺩﻭ ﭘﻳﭻ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻳﭻ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺷﺕ ﺑﺩﻧﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﻭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺍﮔﺭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮔﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﭘﺷﺕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﺩﺭﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺎی ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺷﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺭﺳﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫]ﻧﺻﺏ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ[‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫‪5:37:51‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 11‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺩﺍﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻫﻣﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ Soundbar ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﮑﺷﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫]ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی[‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺁﻭﻳﺯ ﻧﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺭﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺩﺍﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻳﺎﻓﺗﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻳﺎﻓﺗﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺟﺭﺍﺣﺕ ﻓﺭﺩی ﻳﺎ ﺁﺳﻳﺏ ﺩﻳﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻁﻣﺋﻥ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻳﭻ ﮐﻭﺩﮐﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻟﯽ ﺁﻧﺭﺍ ﻧﮑﺷﺩ ﭼﻭﻥ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺗﺎﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻧﺻﺏ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻧﺻﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺕ ﺍﻳﻣﻧﯽ ﺧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻭ ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻧﺻﺏ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۶‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۷٫۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ‪ ۳۲٫۸‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۳۳٫۵‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻫﻣﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪“ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ‪ ”L‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻁﺢ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﭘﻳﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻳﭻ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﻫﻣﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪“ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ‪ ”R‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻁﺢ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻅﺭ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﻭﺍﺯی ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﭘﻳﭻ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﺳﻣﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻳﭻ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﭼپ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻁﻭﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻘﻳﻪ ﺳﻭﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﮑﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫‪5:37:52‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 12‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﺑﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﺏ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ )ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ ID SET‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺷﺕ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺷﯽ ﻧﻭک ﺗﻳﺯ‬
‫ﮐﻭﭼﮏ ﺑﺭﺍی ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ‪ LED) LINK‬ﺁﺑﯽ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺭﻋﺕ‬
‫ﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ )ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫‪) MUTE‬‬
‫( ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﭘﻳﺎﻡ ‪ ID SET‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﺎﺯی ﭘﻳﻭﻧﺩ ﻭ ﻟﻳﻧﮏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻳﻧﮏ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺩ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮐﻧﻭﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﻟﻳﻧﮏ )ﻭﺻﻝ( ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﻟﻳﻧﮏ )‪ LED‬ﺁﺑﯽ( ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺑﻭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﯽ ﻧﻳﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭﺁﻳﻧﺩ ﻟﻳﻧﮏ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺭﺣﻠﻪ ‪ ۲‬ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺟﻠﻭﻩ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﻬﺗﺭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺷﻧﻭﻳﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ(‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﻟﻳﻧﮏ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ )ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ( ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ‪ LINK‬ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺑﺎ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺷﻧﺎﺳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻅﺭﻑ ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﻟﻳﻧﮏ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﮑﻣﻳﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺁﻧﺭﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻁﻊ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﻧﺷﺎﻧﮕﺭ ﻟﻳﻧﮏ )‪ LED‬ﺁﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ( ﺑﺭﺍی ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﺯﺩ‪ LED ،‬ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺭﮐﺎﻧﺱ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ )‪۲٫۴‬‬
‫ﮔﻳﮕﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ( ‪ Soundbar‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺟﺎﻭﺭﺕ ‪ ،Soundbar‬ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﺷﺎﺭ ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﻣﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭی ﺑﺗﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻠﺯی ﺑﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺷﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻧﻔﻭﺫ ﺍﻣﻭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻠﺯ ﺍﺻﻼً ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﻣﺟﺩﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ ﻣﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۶‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺗﻭﻥ ﺳﻣﺕ ﭼپ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺑﺎﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺁﻧﺗﻥ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﻧﮕﻬﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻬﻳﻧﻪ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺗﺟﺭﺑﻪ ﺷﻧﻳﺩﺍﺭی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺍﻁﻣﻳﻧﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻣﺎﻧﻌﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﺣﻝ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫‪5:37:52‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 13‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺳﻳﻡ ﭘﻳﭻ ﻫﺳﺗﻪ ﻓﺭﻳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ‪SOUNDBAR‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺻﺏ ﻫﺳﺗﻪ ﻓﺭﻳﺕ ﺭﻭی ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﻭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﯽ ﺑﮑﺎﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫>ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ‪<Soundbar‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻫﺳﺗﻪ ﻓﺭﻳﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﺳﺗﻪ ﻓﺭﻳﺕ ﺑﭘﻳﭼﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﻳﭼﻳﺩﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ۵‬ﺍﻟﯽ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﻳﻣﺗﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻫﺳﺗﻪ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻫﺳﺗﻪ ﻓﺭﻳﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺩﺍی ﮐﻠﻳﮏ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱۴‬‬
‫‪5:37:54‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 14‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ‬
‫‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺭﻭژﮐﺗﻭﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺧﺵ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺧﺵ ‪ ،Blu-ray‬ﺳﺕ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﺎﮐﺱ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ HDMI‬ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺭﻳﻥ ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﺭ ﻟﺫﺕ ﺑﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ -‬ﮔﻭﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﭘﺧﺵ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ(‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫)‪HDMI OUT (TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ(‬
‫‪HDMI IN‬‬
‫‪(HDMI OUT) ARC‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻳﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ HDMI IN‬ﭘﺷﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻳﺵ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ ARC‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ (ARC) HDMI OUT‬ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ ARC‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪(TV) HDMI OUT‬‬
‫● ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﺯ ‪ ARC‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﻧﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻳﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫)‪ (TV‬ﭘﺷﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻳﺵ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺭﻭی ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺍﺳﻁﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺩﺍ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺫﻳﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۵‬‬
‫‪5:37:55‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 15‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﻧﻭﺭی )ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ( ﻳﺎ ﺻﺩﺍ )ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻭگ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺟﻬﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻳﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﻧﻭﺭی ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻳﺵ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻭگ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻳﻭﻩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ ‪/DVD/BD‬‬
‫ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ‪ /‬ﮐﻧﺳﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺯی‬
‫‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﻧﻭﺭی‬
‫)ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ(‬
‫‪AUDIO‬‬
‫‪OUT‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺻﺩﺍ‬
‫‪OPTICAL IN‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‪،‬‬
‫‪) OPTICAL IN‬ﺻﺩﺍ( ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻳﺵ ‪OPTICAL‬‬
‫‪ OUT‬ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ D.IN‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUX IN‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﺟﺯﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﮑﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭘﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺻﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻣﺎ ً ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻁﻊ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AUX IN‬ﺻﺩﺍ( ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ AUDIO OUT‬ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ AUX‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺏ ﮔﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫ﮔﻳﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺷﮑﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻳﺭﻩ ﻋﺑﻭﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺗﺏ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪DC 24V‬‬
‫‪۱۶‬‬
‫‪5:37:55‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 16‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺩﻟﺧﻭﺍﻩ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )‬
‫( ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﻧﻭﺭی‬
‫‪D.IN‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪AUX‬‬
‫‪AUX‬‬
‫)‪ (SOURCE‬ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ‪Auto Power Down‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ARC/USB/TV/BT/HDMI/D.IN‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﻳﭻ ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ‪ ۱۵‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪BT‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AUX‬ﺑﺭﺍی ‪ ۱۵‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AUX‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ ۸‬ﺳﺎﻋﺕ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﻭﺩ‪) .‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ Auto Power Down‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﭘﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪AUX‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ‪ ،Auto Power Down‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫‪ AUX‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ & ﺭﺍ ‪ 5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ AUTO POWER DOWN ON / OFF‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪(HDMI OUT) ARC‬‬
‫‪) ARC‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺷﺕ ﺻﺩﺍ( ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻭﺭﺕ ‪ (ARC) HDMI OUT‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪ ARC .۱‬ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ‪ Soundbar Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )‬
‫( ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫)‪ (SOURCE‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ D.IN‬ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺭ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ‪ ARC‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ‪ ARC‬ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ‪ Anynet+ ،ARC‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻟﺫﺕ ﺑﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺑﺎﻻی ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ!‬
‫_ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫( ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )‬
‫)‪ (SOURCE‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫‪ BT‬ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﻣﻧﻭی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻭﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻣﻧﻭی ﻫﺩﺳﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﮑﻥ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﻳﺩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ "[Samsung] Soundbar" .۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪Bluetooth Device Name]  BT READY‬‬
‫)ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ BT  [(Bluetooth‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺟﻠﻭ ﻧﺷﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻳﺳﯽ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﻳﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ " _ " ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺟﻔﺕ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﺎ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﺷﺩ‪،‬‬
‫"‪ "[Samsung] Soundbar‬ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺫﻑ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﭼﻧﺩ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻫﻣﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ‪Soundbar‬‬‫ﺟﻔﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﻝ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﻓﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺭﻭﻳﻭ‪،‬‬‫ﻣﺑﺩﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻﻣپ ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺎﻕ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺭﮐﺎﻧﺳﯽ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪۴۴٫۱) SBC‬ﮐﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪،‬‬
‫‪۴۸‬ﮐﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ )‪A2DP (AV‬‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ‪) HF‬ﻫﻧﺩﺯﻓﺭی( ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺧﺵ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﮔﻭﺵ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ ،BT‬ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩﻫﺎی ‪) Play‬ﭘﺧﺵ(‪) Pause/‬ﻣﮑﺙ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) Next‬ﺑﻌﺩی( ‪) Prev/‬ﻗﺑﻠﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻳژﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ Bluetooth‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ AVRCP‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻧﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﮐﺩ ‪ PIN‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﺧﻭﺍﺳﺗﻪ ﺷﺩ‪ <0000> ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﻔﺕ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺗﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺯﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﺩﻫﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﮔﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻳﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻗﻭی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻁﺭﺍﻑ ‪Soundbar‬‬‫ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫‪5:38:07‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 18‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫_ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺯ ‪Soundbar‬‬
‫ﺷﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻗﻁﻊ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻳﻭﻩ ﺍﻳﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫● ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻗﻁﻊ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺕ ‪ BT DISCONNECTED‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﺟﻠﻭی ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﻩ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﺑﺭﺍی ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫)‪ (SOURCE‬ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )‬
‫ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫( ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﺯ ‪ BT‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺗﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫● ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﭘﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺩﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺷﺧﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺕ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ(‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻗﻁﻊ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭘﺭی ﺷﺩﻥ ‪ ۱۵‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪Bluetooth‬‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻥ ﺁﻭﺭی ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ ﺑﺭﺍﺣﺗﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﮐﻭﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﻬﻡ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﻧﻭﻳﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﮐﺎﺭی ﺑﻧﻣﺎﻳﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺷﺭﺍﻳﻁ ﺯﻳﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺧﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﻩ‪/‬ﻓﺭﺳﺗﻧﺩﻩ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﻧﺞ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﺗﻳﺷﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺩﺍﺭی‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮔﺭﻓﺗﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﻡ ﻓﺭﮐﺎﻧﺱ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﭘﺯﺷﮑﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﮑﺭﻭﻳﻭ ﻭ ‪ LAN‬ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﺍ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻡ ﺟﻔﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻬﻡ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻫﺭﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ ﺍﻓﺕ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺩﺍﮐﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﺩ ﻣﻔﻳﺩ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻳﺭﻧﺩﮔﯽ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﻧﺯﺩﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻗﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﻧﻌﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻧﺩ ﺩﻳﻭﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻓﺕ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻳﻥ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺭﺩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺙ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻼﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫‪5:38:20‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 19‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪TV SOUNDCONNECT‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺻﺩﺍی ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺷﻧﻭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺑﺗﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ Samsung TV‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪Soundbar‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﻭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻧﻭی ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺑﻠﻧﺩﮔﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ "ﺻﺩﺍ" ﺑﺭﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻧﻭی "ﺍﻓﺯﻭﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ" ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی "ﺭﻭﺷﻥ" ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )‬
‫( ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫)‪ (SOURCE‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫‪ TV‬ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﻳﺎﻣﯽ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺭﺳﺩ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "[Samsung] Soundbar‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ <Yes> .۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﺗﻣﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺭﺍی ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺧﺎﺗﻣﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺗﻣﻪ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ & ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ ‪ (SoundShare) TV SoundConnect‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻫﺎی ‪ Samsung‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2012‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻣﻠﮑﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ (SoundShare) TV SoundConnect‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺩ‪) .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺗﺭﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻭﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪ Samsung‬ﺷﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2014‬ﻋﺭﺿﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻧﻭی ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ‪ SoundShare‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻳﮑﻧﻭﺍﺧﺕ ﻧﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻭ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎی ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺑﺭﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺗﯽ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺑﺭﺩ ﺟﻔﺕ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ‪ ۵۰‬ﺳﺎﻧﺗﯽ ﻣﺗﺭ‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺑﺭﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺗﯽ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ‪ ۵‬ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪) Play‬ﭘﺧﺵ(‪) Pause/‬ﻣﮑﺙ(‪)Next ،‬ﺑﻌﺩی(‪،‬‬
‫‪)Prev‬ﻗﺑﻠﯽ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﻋﻣﻝ ﻧﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫‪5:38:20‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 20‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻭﺭﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﻧﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ )‬
‫( ﭘﺎﻧﻝ ﺟﻠﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ‬
‫)‪ (SOURCE‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﯽ ﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ (WMA ،MP3) DRM‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﭘﺧﺵ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪) HDD‬ﺩﻳﺳﮏ ﺳﺧﺕ( ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ USB .۳‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۱۵‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ ﻫﻳﭻ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪،‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ )ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺷﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻥ ﻫﻣﺭﺍﻩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭ ﻓﺭﻣﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﺭﻣﺕ‬
‫‪MPEG 1 Layer2‬‬
‫‪*.mp3‬‬
‫_ ﭘﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪MPEG 1 Layer3‬‬
‫‪MPEG 2 Layer3‬‬
‫‪MPEG 2.5 Layer3‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪*.wma‬‬
‫● ﺍﮔﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻭﺷﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻧﻭﻳﺳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻧﺷﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wave_Format_MSAudio1‬‬
‫‪Wave_Format_MSAudio2‬‬
‫‪AAC‬‬
‫● ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺭﺧﯽ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪ USB‬ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﻧﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪*.aac‬‬
‫● ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ‪ FAT16‬ﻭ ‪ FAT32‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﮐﺩﮔﺫﺍﺭی‬
‫‪AAC-LC‬‬
‫‪HE-AAC‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ‪ NTFS‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻳﻣﺎ ً ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻧﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺷﮑﻼﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ‪ USB‬ﺭﻭﺑﺭﻭ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪*.wav‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪*.ogg‬‬
‫‪OGG 1.1.0‬‬
‫‪*.flac‬‬
‫‪FLAC 1.1.0, FLAC 1.2.1‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺭﺥ ﻧﻣﻭﻧﻪ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺭی ﺑﺎﻻی ‪ ۱۶‬ﮐﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫● ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻭﺍﻥ ﭼﻧﺩﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﭘﺭﻭﺗﮑﻝ ﻫﺎی ‪ PTP‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻳﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫‪5:38:27‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 21‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪NETWORK STANDBY ON‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ Network Standby On‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺑﻭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﻭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﻣﺑﺎﺩﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻧﻣﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ‪ BT‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺕ ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻭﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺧﻭﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ Network Standby On‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ $‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ $‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺱ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻔﺕ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺫﮐﺭ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﻭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﻗﺑﻼً ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﻔﺕ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﺕ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ ﮐﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺕ ]‪ [BT READY‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫]‪ [WiFi READY‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺟﻔﺕ ﺳﺎﺯی ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ Network Standby On‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‬
‫‪ Network Standby On -‬ﺭﻭی ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺧﺎﺗﻣﻪ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﻳﺎﻓﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪AUTO POWER LINK‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﭘﺗﻳﮑﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ‪ AUTO POWER LINK‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﭘﺗﻳﮑﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺟﻳﺗﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺷﺩﻥ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﯽ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ Soundbar ،‬ﻧﻳﺯ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar .۱‬ﻭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻳﺭﻭﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﭘﺗﻳﮑﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﻡ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUTO POWER LINK‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﺟﺎﺑﺟﺎ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ DIMMER/Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻳﺵ ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ON‬‬
‫‪OFF‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ‬
‫‪/ ANYNET+ OFF‬‬
‫‪POWER LINK ON‬‬
‫‪/ ANYNET+ ON‬‬
‫‪POWER LINK OFF‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫‪5:38:40‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 22‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪MULTIROOM LINK‬‬
‫_ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺭﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻧﮑﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Multiroom Link‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﭼﻧﺩﻳﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﻬﻡ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺯﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Android‬ﻳﺎ ‪iOS‬‬
‫)ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﻩ(‬
‫ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻣﻠﺯﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫_ ﻧﺻﺏ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Samsung Multiroom‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ‪ Google play‬ﻳﺎ ‪ App Store‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺻﺏ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺻﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻫﻧﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺧﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻧﻧﺩﮔﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺍﻳﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Android‬ﻳﺎ ‪iOS‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Samsung Multiroom‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ Google Play‬ﻳﺎ ‪App Store‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﻳﺎﻓﺗﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﻧﻣﺎﺩ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Multiroom‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ‪Samsung Multiroom :‬‬
‫Ž•œš”ˆ‪z‬‬
‫”––™›“œ‪t‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ANDROID APP ON‬‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫‪5:38:40‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 23‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫_ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪Soundbar‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‪/‬ﺳﻳﻣﯽ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺳﻳﻣﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ )ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Wi-Fi SETUP‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ،WPS‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Multiroom‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ( ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭی ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪LAN‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‬
‫‪LAN‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺧﻭﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ Samsung Multiroom‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﻭﺷﻣﻧﺩ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۳‬ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ "‪ "I don’t have a Hub‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ‪ Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ Soundbar ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ‪ Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﮔﺯﻳﻧﻪ ‪ Wired‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺷﺑﮑﻪ ﺍﻧﺗﺧﺎﺏ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭘﺱ ‪ Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﮐﺎﺑﻝ ‪ LAN‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ LAN‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺭ ﺁﻧﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺧﻭﺩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺷﻣﺎ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﺯ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar .۶‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﺣﻭﻩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺗﺭ ﺳﻳﻣﯽ‪/‬ﺑﻳﺳﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺭﺍی ‪ ،Multiroom Link‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺗﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺭﺍﻫﻧﻣﺎی ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺗﯽ‪) Support  www.Samsung.com :‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ( ‪) Product name search ‬ﺟﺳﺗﺟﻭی ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ( ‪‬‬‫‪ HW-H750‬ﻳﺎ ‪ PDF HW-H751‬ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۴‬‬
‫‪5:38:41‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 24‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫_ ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ ‪USB‬‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻧﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻭﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺭﻭی ‪ ،Soundbar‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﭼﻧﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺩﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻳﺭی ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺕ ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻭﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ Samsung.com‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫_ ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .۱‬ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭی ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﯽ ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ Soundbar ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar .۲‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ UPDATE .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺷﮕﺭ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻅﺭﻑ ﻣﺩﺕ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻭﺗﯽ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺗﻭﺳﻁ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮐﺷﻳﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻕ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﺩﺍﺷﺗﻥ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺧﻭﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻣﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺕ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺗﻭﺍﻧﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻳﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﭘﺱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﻧﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﺷﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﻡ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ FAT16‬ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﺑﻧﺩی ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺗﺣﺎﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ‪ NTFS‬ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﺑﻧﺩی ﻧﮑﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻝ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ‪ NTFS‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺧﯽ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺑﺳﺗﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺩﻩ ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻭﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﮑﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺭ ‪ UPDATE‬ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺷﺩ‬
‫‪ Soundbar .۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻭﺵ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﻠﻪ ﺫﺧﻳﺭﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ‪ USB‬ﻣﺣﺗﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Soundbar‬ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۲‬ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﺍ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Soundbar‬ﺑﻁﻭﺭ ﭘﻳﺵ ﻓﺭﺽ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺟﺭﺍی ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺭﺍی ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻭﺯﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﻭﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪Soundbar ،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺟﺩﺍ ﺷﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺭﻕ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Soundbar‬ﺧﺎﺗﻣﻪ ﺧﻭﺍﻫﺩ ﻳﺎﻓﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Soundbar‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺷﻭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۵‬‬
‫‪5:38:42‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 25‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﺏ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻳﺏ ﻳﺎﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺧﻭﺍﺳﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﻳﻝ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻥ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺳﻳﻡ ﺑﺭﻕ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺕ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﮑﺗﺭﻳﺳﻳﺗﻪ ﺳﺎﮐﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻭﺍ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺭﻳﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺯﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺩﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻧﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺻﺩﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺕ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺭﺍی ﻟﻐﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻳﺕ ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪) Mute‬ﺑﻳﺻﺩﺍ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺣﺩﺍﻗﻝ ﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺩ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﺻﺩﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﺗﺭی ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﮕﺫﺍﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻳﻥ ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺧﻳﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺕ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) TV SoundConnect‬ﺟﻔﺕ ﺳﺎﺯی ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﻧﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺷﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ؟‬
‫‪ TV SoundConnect ‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﺿﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻫﺎی ‪ Samsung‬ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2012‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺍﺭ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺑﻳﻧﻳﺩ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪TV SoundConnect‬‬
‫ﭘﺷﺗﻳﺑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺧﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻧﺳﺧﻪ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻧﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺧﻁﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪) TV MODE‬ﺣﺎﻟﺕ ﺗﻠﻭﻳﺯﻳﻭﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺷﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ & ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﻪ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ TV SoundConnect‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺭﻗﺭﺍﺭ ﺷﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ LED‬ﻗﺭﻣﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﭼﺷﻣﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺻﺩﺍﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺧﺵ ﻧﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻣﮑﻥ ﺍﺳﺕ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺩﻧﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺻﻝ ﻧﺷﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻭﺻﻝ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺣﻪ ‪ ۱۳‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ(‬
‫ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﺯﻭﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻁﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺳﻭﺱ ﻣﯽ ﻟﺭﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻌﯽ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ ﻟﺭﺯﺵ ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﮐﻣﻪ ‪ WOOFER‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﻧﺗﺭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻳﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ )ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ SW-6‬ﻭ ‪ (SW+6‬ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۶‬‬
‫‪5:38:49‬‬
‫‪2014-11-04‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 26‬‬
‫ﺿﻣﻳﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺿﻣﻳﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﻓﻧﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺩﻝ‬
‫‪HW-H760‬‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫)ﻁﻭﻝ ‪ x‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪x‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ(‬
‫‪۰٫۵A/۵V‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ ۳٫۳‬ﮐﻳﻠﻭﮔﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ )‪(PS-WH760‬‬
‫‪ ۹٫۸‬ﮐﻳﻠﻭﮔﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ ۵۷ x ۱۲۳ x ۹۴۳‬ﻣﻳﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ )‪(PS-WH760‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰۵٫۵ x ۳۸۸٫۵ x ۳۰۵٫۵‬ﻣﻳﻠﻳﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ +۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺗﻳﮕﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺎ ‪ +۳۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺗﻳﮕﺭﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺩﻣﺎی ﮐﺎﺭی‬
‫ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﻩ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺕ ﮐﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﻣﯽ ﺧﺭﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﺁﻣﭘﻠﻳﻔﺎﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۷۵‬ﺩﺭﺻﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺟﻠﻭ‬
‫‪ ۴۰‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ۶ ،‬ﺍﻫﻡ‪ ۱ ،٪۱ = THD ،‬ﮐﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ ۴۰‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ ۶ ،‬ﺍﻫﻡ‪ ۱ ،٪۱ = THD ،‬ﮐﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺏ ﻭﻭﻓﺭ )‪(PS-WH760‬‬
‫‪ ۱۶۰‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪ ۳ ،‬ﺍﻫﻡ‪ ۱۰۰ ،٪۱۰ = THD ،‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺕ ‪ S/N‬ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻭﻳﺯ )ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻭگ(‬
‫‪ ۶۵‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ )‪ 1‬ﮐﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫‪ ۶۵‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻝ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺳﻧﺟﺵ ﻧﺳﺑﺕ ‪ ،S/N‬ﺍﻋﻭﺟﺎﺝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﮑﻳﮏ ﻭ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ‪) AES‬ﺍﻧﺟﻣﻥ ﻣﻬﻧﺩﺳﯽ ﺻﺩﺍ( ﺍﻧﺟﺎﻡ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﻣﯽ‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪ Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd‬ﺣﻕ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻗﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺭﺍی ﺧﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﯽ ﻫﺳﺗﻧﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﺁﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺷﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺫﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺻﺭﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺭﭼﺳﺏ ﺩﺳﺗﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ a‬ﺍﻁﻼﻋﻳﻪ ﻣﺟﻭﺯ ﮐﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺕ ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻥ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺍﺯ ﻭﺏ ﺳﺎﻳﺕ ﺯﻳﺭ ﺩﻳﺩﻥ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪http://opensource.samsung.com :‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‬‫‪-‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻭﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺭﻡ ﺍﻓﺯﺍﺭ ‪ Spotify‬ﻣﺷﻣﻭﻝ ﻣﺟﻭﺯﻫﺎی ﺍﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ ﺍﺳﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻧﺟﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﺳﺗﺭﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺕ‪.www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses :‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍی ﮐﺳﺏ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺷﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ Spotify Connect‬ﺑﻪ ‪ www.spotify.com/connect‬ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻧﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫‪4:32:05‬‬
‫‪2014-11-10‬‬
‫‪HW-H760_HC_PER_141110.indd 27‬‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺭﺍﺳﺭ ﺩﻧﻳﺎ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬
.‫ ﺗﻣﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻳﺭﻳﺩ‬SAMSUNG ‫ ﻟﻁﻔﺎ ً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺭﮐﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺗﺭﻳﺎﻥ‬،‫ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺩ‬Samsung ‫ﺍﮔﺭ ﻫﺭﮔﻭﻧﻪ ﭘﺭﺳﺵ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻅﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺣﺻﻭﻻﺕ‬
Contact Centre 
Area
` Asia Pacific
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
1300 362 603
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786)
400-810-5858
HONG KONG
(852) 3698 4698
INDIA
INDONESIA
JAPAN
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
` MENA
U.A.E
OMAN
KUWAIT
BAHRAIN
QATAR
1800 3000 8282 - Toll Free
1800 266 8282 - Toll Free
30308282 - Non Toll Free
0800112888
021-56997777
0120-327-527
1800-88-9999
1-800-10-7267864 [PLDT]
1-800-8-7267864 [Globe landline and Mobile]
02-4222111 [Other landline]
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0-2689-3232,
1800-29-3232
0800-32-9999
1800 588 889
SYRIA
IRAN
MOROCCO
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
183-2255 (183-CALL)
8000-4726
800-2255 (800-CALL)
08000-726786
16580
021 36 11 00
0800-Samsung (72678)
80-1000-12
0800-22273
06 5777444
18252273
021-8255
080 100 2255
SAUDI ARABIA
920021230
TURKEY
` Africa
NIGERIA
444 77 11
EGYPT
ALGERIA
PAKISTAN
TUNISIA
JORDAN
Ghana
Cote D’ Ivoire
SENEGAL
CAMEROON
KENYA
UGANDA
TANZANIA
RWANDA
BURUNDI
DRC
SUDAN
SOUTH AFRICA
BOTSWANA
NAMIBIA
ZAMBIA
MOZAMBIQUE
0800-726-7864
0800-10077
0302-200077
8000 0077
800-00-0077
7095- 0077
0800 545 545
0800 300 300
0685 88 99 00
9999
200
499999
1969
0860 SAMSUNG (726 7864)
8007260000
08 197 267 864
0211 350370
847267864 / 827267864
HW-H760_HC_PER_141104.indd 28
Web Site
www.samsung.com/au/support
www.samsung.com/nz/support
www.samsung.com/cn/support
www.samsung.com/hk/support (Chinese)
www.samsung.com/hk_en/support (English)
www.samsung.com/in/support
www.samsung.com/id/support
www.samsung.com/jp/support
www.samsung.com/my/support
www.samsung.com/ph/support
www.samsung.com/sg/support
www.samsung.com/th/support
www.samsung.com/tw/support
www.samsung.com/vn/support
www.samsung.com/ae/support (English)
www.samsung.com/ae_ar/support (Arabic)
www.samsung.com/eg/support
www.samsung.com/n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/pk/support
www.samsung.com/n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English)
www.samsung.com/Levant/support (English)
www.samsung.com/iran/support
www.samsung.com/n_africa/support
www.samsung.com/sa/support
www.samsung.com/sa_en/support (English)
www.samsung.com/tr/support
www.samsung.com/africa_en/support
www.samsung.com/africa_fr/support
www.samsung.com/support
www.samsung.com/support
2014-11-04
5:38:49